204
National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 SECTION 033000 - PART 1 - GENERAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Curing compounds.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control …files.vipstructures.com/estimating/15-8557-NG-EdicStation-Control... · National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station

  • Upload
    dinhbao

  • View
    216

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Curing compounds.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2

5. Floor and slab treatments. 6. Adhesives. 7. Vapor retarders. 8. Joint-filler strips. 9. Repair materials.

B. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301

1. Maintain concrete temperature below

and as follows:

90 deg F

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 3012.

. ACI 117

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

.

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

C. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than

to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

1 inch

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

in diameter in concrete surface.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II,. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120. 4. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

nominal.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5

F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils

2.7 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

thick.

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

when dry.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating.

G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating.

H. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

I. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Slag Cement: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 50 percent portland cement minimum,

with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Slag Cement, and Silica Fume: 50 percent with fly ash

or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.58.

at 28 days.

3. Slump Limit: 5 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch

B. Foundation Walls: Normal-weight concrete.

.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.46.

at 28 days.

3. Slump Limit: 5 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7

4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch

C. Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete.

nominal maximum aggregate size.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.55.

at 28 days.

3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

.

2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.13 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd.

2. For mixer capacity larger than

or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd.

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of

, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

ACI 117

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

.

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

I. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

J. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

into concrete.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 1/3 of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 3013. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least

.

6 inches

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view,.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12

Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15.

, for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

3. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

.

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 6 inches high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not

less than 6 inches

3. Minimum Compressive Strength:

in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.

4000 psi4. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,

templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

at 28 days.

5. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching

for hot-weather protection during curing.

0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13

operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least

lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

12 inches

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14

3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENT APPLICATION

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs.

2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days' old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet;

and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes

to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch

7. Repair random cracks and single holes

clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

1 inch

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 16

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each or fraction thereof.

100 cu. yd.

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. and above, and one test for each composite sample.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi

10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

.

11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 17

requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155

3.15 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

within 48 hours of finishing.

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.

END OF SECTION 033000

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Structural steel. 2. Prefabricated building columns. 3. Field-installed shear connectors. 4. Grout.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

B. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD, or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC 172).

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 3

3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

F. Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11.

G. Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M.

H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436

B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

C. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Configuration: Hooked. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 5633. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

hex carbon steel.

4. Washers: ASTM F 4365. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

D. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 5632. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

hex carbon steel.

3. Washers: ASTM F 4364. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

E. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 4

1. Nuts: ASTM A 5632. Washers:

hex carbon steel. ASTM F 436

3. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. , Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

F. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.

G. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.

H. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113

2.4 PAINT

A. Paint: Shop paint all steel per Section 099113.

2.5 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 5

E. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing to be attached to structural-steel frame. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. Build up welded framing, weld exposed joints continuously, and grind smooth.

F. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 6

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 7

2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 8

3.5 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS

A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC 360, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements of testing and inspecting agency that apply to the fire-resistance rating indicated.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

E. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113

END OF SECTION 051200

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

THERMAL INSULATION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Expanded polystyrene (EPS) Geofoam. 2. Vapor retarders.

1.2 References:

A. ASTM D6817 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Geofoam.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Submit EPS Geofoam manufacturer’s product literature and TechData, including: 1. Physical properties in compliance with ASTM D6817 Type specified. 2. 10-year physical property warranty.

C. Shop drawings showing EPS Geofoam block layout.

D. Quality Assurance: Submit the following: 1. Test Compliance: Summary of test compliance with specified performance characteristics

and physical properties. 2. Certificates: Manufacturer shall supply a product certificate showing evidence of Third

Party Quality Control.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Provide EPS Geofoam 10- year warranty covering the long-term physical property of expanded polystyrene Geofoam.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EPS GEOFOAM

A. Foam-Control EPS Geofoam in compliance with ASTM D6817.

B. Select one or more of the Foam-Control EPS Geofoam Types from the listings as follows, as required by the project:

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2

1. Foam-Control EPS Geofoam: ASTM D6817, Type EPS22, see Structural drawings for related requirements.

C. All Foam-Control EPS Geofoam blocks shall be treated by the manufacturer with a tested and proven termite treatment for below grade applications, 3 year minimum field exposure. The treatment shall be EPA registered, meet requirements of ICC ES AC239, and be recognized in an ICC ES report.

2.2 MANUFACTURES/SUPPLIERS

A. Mid-Atlantic Foam, Inc., 57 Joseph Mills Drive, Fredericksburg, VA 22404 B. Mid-Atlantic Foam, Inc., 326 McGhee Road, Winchester, VA 22603 C. NoArk Enterprises, Inc., 10101 Highway 70 East, North Little Rock, AR 72117

D. ACH Foam Technologies, LLC, 90 Trowbridge Drive, Fond du Lac, WI 54936-0660

E. ACH Foam Technologies, LLC, 4001 Kaw Drive, Kansas City, KS 66102

F. ACH Foam Technologies, LLC, 1418 Cow Palace Road, Newton, KS 67114

G. ACH Foam Technologies, LLC, 809 East 15th

2.3 GEOGRIPPER PLATES

Street, Washington, IA 52353

A. GeoGripper® plates shall be used to restrain EPS Geofoam from moving laterally in layer over layer applications. The GeoGripper plate shall be manufactured by AFM Corporation. The plate shall be made of galvanized or stainless steel with two-sided multi-barbed design capable of piercing geofoam. Each plate shall be capable of a lateral holding strength of 60 lbs.

2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 10 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. Stego Wrap or equal

B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.

C. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.

END OF SECTION 072100

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.23 - 1

SECTION 074113.23 - INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulated metal roof panels.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product test reports.

B. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.23 - 2

1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 72:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.003 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 1680 and ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 and ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 20.0 lbf/sq. ft.

D. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.

1. Uplift Rating: UL 90.

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient.

2.2 FOAMED-INSULATION-CORE METAL ROOF PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled metal roof panels fabricated from two sheets of metal with insulation core foamed in place during fabrication with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

1. Panel Performance:

a. Flatwise Tensile Strength: 30 psi when tested according to ASTM C 297/C 297M. b. Humid Aging: Volume increase not greater than 6.0 percent and no delamination

or metal corrosion when tested for seven days at 140 deg F and 100 percent relative humidity according to ASTM D 2126.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.23 - 3

c. Heat Aging: Volume increase not greater than 4.0 percent and no delamination, surface blistering, or permanent bowing when tested for seven days at 200 deg F according to ASTM D 2126.

d. Cold Aging: Volume decrease not more than 1.0 percent and no delamination, surface blistering, or permanent bowing when tested for seven days at minus 10 deg F according to ASTM D 2126.

e. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Class A according to ASTM E 108.

2. Insulation Core: Modified isocyanurate foam using a non-CFC blowing agent, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively.

a. Closed-Cell Content: 88 percent when tested according to ASTM D 6226. b. Density: 2.0 to 2.6 lb/cu. Ft. when tested according to ASTM D 1622. c. Compressive Strength: Minimum 20 psi when tested according to ASTM D 1621. d. Shear Strength: 15 psi when tested according to ASTM C 273.

B. Standing-Seam-Profile, Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical tongue-and-groove ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by interlocking tongue-and-groove panel edges and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located between panels and engaging edges of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Metl-Span CFR Roof Panel b. Kingspan KingZip Roof Panel

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Facings of aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.034 inch (22 gauge exterior and interior face). b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

1) Color: Driftwood - 431B922

c. Interior Finish: Siliconized polyester.

1) Color: White.

3. Joint Type: As standard with manufacturer. 4. Panel Coverage: 42 inches. 5. Panel Thickness: 4.0 inches.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.23 - 4

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as exterior facings of metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. Provide roof panels that extend full width of roof, with no end laps.

C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.23 - 5

2.5 FINISHES

A. Exterior Facings and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Interior Facings:

1. Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for primer and 0.8 mil for topcoat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Standing-Seam, Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Roof Panels: Fasten insulated metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer

tool so cleat, insulated metal roof panel, and factory-applied side-lap sealant are completely engaged.

B. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

C. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.23 - 6

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

END OF SECTION 074113.23

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.19 - 1

SECTION 074213.19 - INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Foamed-insulation-core metal wall panels.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product test reports.

B. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.19 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 72:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.001 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 20 psf.

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 20 psf .

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient.

2.2 FOAMED-INSULATION-CORE METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled metal wall panels fabricated from two metal facing sheets and insulation core foamed in place during fabrication, and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

1. Panel Performance:

a. Flatwise Tensile Strength: 30 psi when tested according to ASTM C 297/C 297M.

b. Heat Aging: Volume increase not greater than 4.0 percent and no delamination, surface blistering, or permanent bowing when tested for seven days at 200 deg F according to ASTM D 2126.

c. Cold Aging: Volume decrease not more than 1.0 percent and no delamination, surface blistering, or permanent bowing when tested for seven days at minus 20 deg F according to ASTM D 2126.

2. Insulation Core: Modified isocyanurate foam using a non-CFC blowing agent, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively.

a. Closed-Cell Content: 88 percent when tested according to ASTM D 6226. b. Density: 2.0 to 2.6 lb/cu. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 1622.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.19 - 3

c. Compressive Strength: Minimum 20 psi when tested according to ASTM D 1621. d. Shear Strength: 25 psi when tested according to ASTM C 273/C 273M.

B. Concealed-Fastener, Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Wall Panels: Formed with tongue-and-groove panel edges; designed for sequential installation by interlocking panel edges and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips or fasteners.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Kingspan; 300 Minor Rib Series Wall Panel. b. Metl-Span LLC; Light Mesa Insulated Metal Wall Panel.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Facings of aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.034 inch (22 gauge), both exterior and interior face. b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

1) Color: Dove Gray – 43R1021

c. Interior Finish: Siliconized polyester.

1) Color: White.

3. Panel Coverage: 42 inches nominal. 4. Panel Thickness: 3.0 inches.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M,Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.19 - 4

not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for primer and 0.8 mil for topcoat.

3. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.19 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.2 INSULATED METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Apply continuous ribbon of sealant to panel joint on concealed side of insulated metal wall panels as vapor seal; apply sealant to panel joint on exposed side of panels for weather seal.

1. Fasten foamed-insulation-core metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.

2. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.

3. Provide sealant tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

B. Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with concealed clips at each joint at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Fully engage tongue and groove of adjacent panels.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.

C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

END OF SECTION 074213.19

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

JOINT SEALANTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Urethane joint sealants.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product test reports.

B. Warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Pecora Corporation.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2

d. Polymeric Systems, Inc. e. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. f. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Single component (S). 3. Grade: Nonsag (NS). 4. Class: 35. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).

2.3 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior and interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between metal panels and metal trims. c. At interior gypsum board assemblies. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and louvers. f. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

END OF SECTION 079200

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 1

SECTION 089119 – FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers, with drainable blades.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 074213.19 Insulated Metal Panels. 2. Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 3. Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 4. Section 233300 Air Duct Accessories.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.

B. Windborne-debris-impact-resistance test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. Refer to the Structural General Notes drawing S100 for the required limits.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 2

B. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Louvers located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade shall pass basic -protection, large-missile testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 3

C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.

when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than louvers indicated for use on Project.

2.2 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal, Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: As a basis of quality and design, use Ruskin ELF6425DD. Refer to drawing M100, Louver Schedule for additional information.

a.

b.

Ruskin Manufacturing,3900 Dr. Greaves Road, Kansas City, Missouri 64030. Ph(8160 761-7476. Architectural Louvers; Harray, LLC.

c. Construction Specialties, Inc. d.

Arrow United Industries

2. Frame: a. Material: Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. b. Wall Thickness: 0.081 inch (2.1 MM),nominal. c. Depth: 6 inches (152mm). d. Downspouts and caulking surfaces.

3. Blades:

a. Style: Double drainable with continuous leading edge. b. Material: 0.081 inch(2.1mm), nominal. c. Angle: 42.5 degrees. d. Centers: 5 inches (127mm).

4. Gutters:

a. Dual drain gutters in each blade.

5. Downspouts: a. Downspouts in concealed mullions to drain water from louver for minimum water

cascade from blade to blade.

6. Concealed Mullions: Mullions recessed 2” from exterior and placed 120” to drain blade gutters without interruption of the leading edge of the blades.

7. Louver Performance Ratings: Refer to drawing M100, Louver Schedule for additional information.

a. Free Area ratio: Not less than 7.0 sq. ft. (0.65 sq. m) for 48-inch- (1220-mm-) wide by 48-inch- (1220-mm-) high louver.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 3

b. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg (25-Pa) static pressure drop at 600-fpm (3.0-m/s) free-area intake velocity.

c. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 95 percent effectiveness when subjected to a rainfall rate of 3 inches (75 mm) per hour and a wind speed of 29 mph (13 m/s) at a core-area intake velocity of 300 fpm (1.5 m/s).

8. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.3 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Bird screening.

B. Louver Screen Frames: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached.

C. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square mesh, 0.063-inch (1.60-mm) wire.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 4

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

1. Color: As Selected by Architect from full range of manufactures standard colors.

B. Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer Coating: 1. Conform to AAMA 605.2. 2. Total Dry Film Thickness: Approximately 1.2 mils (0.03mm 0, when baked at 450

degress F for 10 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weather-tight connection.

C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

END OF SECTION 089119

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (20 gauge). 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Provide one of the following in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch deep flanges, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch deep flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes due to deflection of structure above.

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (20 gauge).

D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch thick, galvanized steel.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide foam gasket.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

END OF SECTION 092216

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Interior gypsum board.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.2 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Control Joints: Install control joints from edge of door frames extended to bottom of metal roof panel above.

E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

H. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

I. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

END OF SECTION 092900

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Gypsum board.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming and shop finish painting of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a matte flat finish.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a high-side sheen flat, velvet-like finish.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, an eggshell finish.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a satin-like finish.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a semi-gloss finish.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a gloss finish.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PAINTING 099123 - 2

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin-Williams “Custodian Project Color and Product Information” report or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, Material Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.

B. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PAINTING 099123 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin-Williams Company products indicated or comparable product from one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Glidden Professional, Division of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 3. Pratt & Lambert.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed manufacturer.

1. Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color reference only and do not indicate prior approval.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in question, apply samples and perform in-situ testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and film integrity of new paint application.

1. Report, in writing, conditions that may affect application, appearance, or performance of paint.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PAINTING 099123 - 4

B. Substrate Conditions:

1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Concrete: 12 percent. b. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

2. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PAINTING 099123 - 5

H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete:

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PAINTING 099123 - 6

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, exterior, MPI #3: S-W Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer Sealer, A24W8300, at 8.0 mils wet, 3.2 mils dry.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low-sheen[, (Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15]: S-W A-100

Exterior Latex Low Sheen, A12 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat.

B. Metal Substrates (Aluminum, Steel, Galvanized Steel):

1. Latex System: All except wall panels.

a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based, MPI #107: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, at 5.0 to 10 mils wet, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry.

b. Intermediate Coat: Water-based acrylic, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Water-based acrylic, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147 X-Green:

S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series, at 2.5 to 4.0 mils dry, per coat.

1. Acrylic/Alkyd System: At metal wall panels

a. Prime Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, at 5.0 to 10.0 mils wet, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry.

b. Intermediate Coat: Water-based acrylic-alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Water-based acrylic-alkyd, semi-gloss, interior: S-W ProMar 200

Waterbased Acrylic-Alkyd Semi-Gloss, B34-8200 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry, per coat.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, interior, MPI #149 X-Green: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52 X-Green/#145 X-

Green: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry, per coat.

END OF SECTION 099123

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1

SECTION 230513 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

above sea level.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 2

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

H. Insulation: Class B, unless noted otherwise.

I. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 3

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 230513

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

B. Certified TAB reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor or technician shall be certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB.

B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by engineer.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 2

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts if specified and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

F. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

G. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

H. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

I. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 3

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided. 6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials.

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams (elevations) of fan systems.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 4

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as/if specified.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 5

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 6

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:

1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent

3.9 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

3.10 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 7

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves. 2. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. e. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 3. Terminal units. 4. Balancing stations. 5. Position of balancing devices.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 8

3.11 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

END OF SECTION 230593

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1

SECTION 230900 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each control device indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Schematic flow diagrams. 2. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. 3. Details of control panel faces. 4. Damper schedule. 5. DDC System Hardware: Wiring diagrams, schematic floor plans, and schematic control

diagrams. 6. Control System Software: Schematic diagrams, written descriptions, and points list.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control test reports.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

B. Software and firmware operational documentation.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Control System shall be an extension of National Grid’s existing building control system.

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.

C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics.

2.2 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and

controlled environment.

B. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 3

C. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA),

or resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally

open or normally closed operation. 5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current

(4 to 20 mA). 6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point,

floating-type electronic actuators. 7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

D. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50

percent load changes. 3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent

overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

E. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.

2.3 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application.

1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup.

2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.

3. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 4

2.4 ANALOG CONTROLLERS

A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor.

B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F,

C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority.

and single- or double-pole contacts.

1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer.

D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference.

2.5 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.

B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.

at calibration point.

3. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed. c. Thermometer: Exposed.

4. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 5. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 5

C. RTDs and Transmitters:

1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point. 2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 3. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed. c. Thermometer: Exposed.

4. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 5. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

D. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. 2. Set-Point Indication: Exposed. 3. Thermometer: Exposed.

E. Room sensor accessories include the following:

1. Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls.

2.6 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.

B. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.

C. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements.

D. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

2.7 THERMOSTATS

A. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F

B. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator; listed for electrical

maximum differential.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 6

rating; with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F

1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors.

maximum differential.

2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto.

C. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. 2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields. 3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements,

extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported. 4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of

instrument. 5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by

application. 6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly

is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.

D. Fire-Protection Thermostats: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction; with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 deg F

1. Reset: Manual.

above normal maximum operating temperature, and the following:

2. Reset: Automatic, with control circuit arranged to require manual reset at central control panel; with pilot light and reset switch on panel labeled to indicate operation.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 7

E. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. 2. Set-Point Indication: Exposed. 3. Thermometer: Exposed.

F. Room thermostat accessories include the following:

1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.

G. Electric, Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches

1. Bulb Length: Minimum

of bulb length is equal to or below set point.

20 feet2. Quantity: One thermostat for every

. 20 sq. ft.

2.8 ACTUATORS

of coil surface.

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf (33.9 N x m)

4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than .

NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m)

5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than .

25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf (33.9 N x m)

6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than .

25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m).

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 8

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

1. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft.b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals:

of damper. 5 inch-lb/sq. ft.

c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: of damper.

4 inch-lb/sq. ftd. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals:

of damper. 3 inch-lb/sq. ft.

e. Dampers with of damper.

2- to 3-Inch wg (500 to 750 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm (5 to 13 m/s)

f. Dampers with : Increase running torque by 1.5.

3- to 4-Inch wg (750 to 1000 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm (13 to 15 m/s)

2. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

: Increase running torque by 2.0.

3. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 4. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on nonspring-return actuators. 5. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc. 6. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal. 7. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F8. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers):

. Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F

9. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed. .

2.9 DAMPERS

A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches

1. Secure blades to

.

1/2-inch

2. Operating Temperature Range: From

diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

minus 40 to plus 200 deg F3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene.

.

4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg (1000 Pa) when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 9

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify location of exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 60 inches

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

above the floor.

B. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

1. Where indicated.

C. Install automatic dampers according to Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.

E. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Section 233113 "Metal Ducts".

3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Install building wire and cable according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

D. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 10

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation

with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control

set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence

of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks.

C. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration and testing. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation and other

applicable considerations. 4. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 5. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls.

END OF SECTION 230900

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

METAL DUCTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (Z180)2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

.

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches

2.3 SEALANT AND GASKETS

.

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches (76 mm)3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.

.

4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 pa)7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.

, positive and negative.

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum.

.

10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa)8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

, positive and negative.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M)

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

C. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

E. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

F. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch

G. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

D. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa)

3. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.

and Lower: Seal Class C.

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

of each branch intersection.

D. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet

E. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7

B. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, condensate drain pans, filters and filter sections.

4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

C. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3.7 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.8 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg (500 Pa)b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.

.

2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg (500 Pa)b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.

.

3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg (500 Pa)b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.

.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8

B. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa)b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive

pressure.

.

END OF SECTION 233113

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Control dampers. 3. Flange connectors. 4. Duct accessory hardware.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (Z180)2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

.

B. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M)

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel,

, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches

2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

.

A. Description: Gravity balanced.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2

B. Maximum Air Velocity: 1000 fpm (5.1 m/s)

C. Maximum System Pressure:

.

2-inch wg (0.5 kPa)

D. Blade Action: Parallel.

.

E. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.

F. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch

G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

.

H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

I. Bearings: synthetic pivot bushings.

J. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gageb. Sleeve Length:

minimum. 6 inches

6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.

minimum.

7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel. 8. Screen Type: Bird. 9. 90-degree stops.

2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Frames:

1. Hat shaped. 2. 0.094-inch 3. Mitered and welded corners.

thick, galvanized sheet steel.

B. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches2. Parallel- and opposed-blade design.

.

3. Galvanized-steel. 4. Blade Edging: PVC. 5. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3

C. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-

1. Operating Temperature Range: From

diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

minus 40 to plus 200 deg F

D. Bearings:

.

1. Oil-impregnated bronze. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa)

3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS

A. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

B. Material: Galvanized steel.

C. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.6 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft and control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4

F. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

END OF SECTION 233300

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1

SECTION 233423 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Propeller fans.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PROPELLER FANS

A. Housing: Galvanized-steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel finish coat applied after assembly.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 2

B. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub.

C. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast or extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.

D. Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.

E. Fan Drive:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Statically and dynamically balanced. 3. Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower,

with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 4. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit. 5. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4. 6. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 7. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10

F. Accessories:

of 100,000 hours.

1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame; interlocked blades with nylon bearings.

2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable for maintenance.

3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. 4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. 5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen. 6. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50

percent. 7. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside

fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 3

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stops having a static deflection of 1 inch

B. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

. Vibration-control devices are specified in

C. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 4

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

C. Lubricate bearings.

END OF SECTION 233423

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 234100 - 1

SECTION 234100 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pleated panel filters.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality"; Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment"; and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

2. Comply with ASHRAE 52.1 for arrestance and ASHRAE 52.2 for MERV for methods of testing and rating air-filter units.

B. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLEATED PANEL FILTERS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, self-supported, extended-surface, pleated, panel-type, disposable air filters with holding frames.

B. Filter Unit Class: UL 900, Class 2.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 234100 - 2

C. Media: Interlaced glass or synthetic fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive.

1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

3. Media shall be coated with an antimicrobial agent. 4. Separators shall be bonded to the media to maintain pleat configuration. 5. Welded wire grid shall be on downstream side to maintain pleat. 6. Media shall be bonded to frame to prevent air bypass. 7. Support members on upstream and downstream sides to maintain pleat spacing.

D. Filter-Media Frame: Cardboard frame with perforated metal retainer sealed or bonded to the media.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames to substrate.

B. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.

C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters.

D. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling-unit installations.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating.

C. Air filter will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 234100 - 3

3.3 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing of air-handling and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.

END OF SECTION 234100

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

SELF CONTAINED VERTICAL AIR-CONDITIONERS 238113 - 1

SECTION 238113 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

SELF CONTAINED VERTICAL AIR-CONDITIONERS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Self Contained air conditioners and their accessories and controls, in the following configurations:

1. Cooling units with electric heat.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For self contained air conditioners. Include plans, elevations, sections, details for wall penetrations, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Color Samples: For unit cabinet, discharge grille, and exterior louver, and for each color and texture specified.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of Self Contained air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Sealed Refrigeration System: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion, including components and labor.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

SELF CONTAINED VERTICAL AIR-CONDITIONERS 238113 - 2

2. Warranty Period for Nonsealed System Parts: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion, including only components and excluding labor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Furnish and install a self contained, vertical, exterior wall mount, through-the-wall air conditioner to be manufactured by Bard Manufacturing Company, Inc. The unit shall be approved and listed by Intertek ETL Listed (ETL US/C). Unit shall be factory assembled, pre-charged, pre-wired, tested and ready to operate. Unit performance shall be certified in accordance with the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standard 390-2003 for Single Package Vertical Units.

B. Manufacturers: Capacities shall be as indicated on drawings and units shall be manufactured by Bard Manufacturing Company, Inc. or prior approved equal.

2.2 CABINET

Construction shall be a single, enclosed, weatherproof casing constructed of 20-gauge galva-nized steel. Unit base is constructed of 16-gauge galvanized steel¹. Each exterior casing panel to be bonderized and finished with baked-on exterior polyester enamel paint² prior to assembly. The baked-on cured paint finish shall pass the industry rub test with a minimum of 72 rubs MEK (Methyl Ethyl Ketone) or standard rub test of a minimum of 100 rubs using Tolulene. Cooling section shall be fully insulated with 1-inch fiberglass to prevent sweating and to muffle sounds. Openings shall be provided for power connections. Access openings appropriate for outside structure to all fan motors and compressor for making repairs and for removing internal components without removing unit from its permanent installation. Fresh air intake and outdoor coil shall be protected from intrusions by a sturdy metal grating with less than 1/4 inch open-ings.

2.3 DRAIN PAN

A. Drain Pan shall be constructed of 20-gauge stainless steel.

2.4 INSULATION

A. Portions of the unit that come in contact with the indoor air steam shall be insulated with high density 1 inch fiberglass, foil face insulation.

2.5 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Full-length side mounting brackets shall be an integral part of the cabinet.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

SELF CONTAINED VERTICAL AIR-CONDITIONERS 238113 - 3

2.6 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

All models shall use a high efficiency scroll compressor with step capacity providing 2 stages of control. The compressor shall be covered by a 5-year parts warranty. The refrigeration cir-cuit shall be equipped with factory installed high and low-pressure controls. The refrigeration control shall be a factory installed TXV. Compressor shall be mounted on isolation rails with double grommets. Insulated sound cover shall be provided to reduce compressor noise. Crank-case heater shall be provided. Unit shall be provided with R-410A (HFC) non-ozone depleting refrigerant. Unit shall be provided with liquid line filter/drier. Current sensing relay shall be used to detect high amps caused by high ambient and/or low voltage and to shift compressor to 1st-stage operation until conditions corrected.

2.7 CONDENSER FAN MOTOR

The condenser fan motor shall be a permanent split capacitor, outdoor motor. Condenser fan and motor shall be in slide out configuration for easy access.

2.8 INDOOR BLOWER MOTOR

The indoor blower motor shall be a high efficiency, variable speed (ECM) type motor. Motor shall provide soft start, slowly ramping up to speed to provide quiet operation. The motor shall be self-adjusting to provide proper airflow at high static pressures without user adjustment or wiring changes by the user. The motor shall be programmed for 20-second ramp up and 60-second down rate for quiet, smooth starting and stopping.

2.9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Electrical components are easily accessible for routine inspection and maintenance through front service panels. Circuit breaker is standard on all 208/230-volt models and rotary discon-nect standard on all 460-volt models. Circuit breaker/rotary disconnect access is through lock-able access panel. Phase rotation monitors shall be installed on all 3-phase units to prevent re-verse rotation.

2.10 CONTROL CIRCUIT

A. The internal control circuit shall consist of a current limiting 24VAC type 50VA transformer. To prevent rapid compressor short cycling, a five-minute time delay circuit shall be factory in-stalled. A low-pressure bypass shall be factory installed to prevent nuisance tripping during low temperature start-up.

B. All units with 3-phase power shall include factory mounted phase rotation monitor. This device shall protect scroll compressor from reverse rotation and also protect unit from phase failure. If 3-phase power is incorrectly connected at the field power connections, the phase monitor shall lock out the unit and a red light will illuminate indicating incorrect phase. Also if a power leg is lost, the phase monitor will lockout the unit due to phase imbalance. Once the condition is cor-rected, turning the power off at the circuit breaker or disconnect will reset the phase monitor.

C. Compressor Control module shall be factory installed with: 1. Built in delay-off timer adjustable from 30 seconds to 5 minutes.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

SELF CONTAINED VERTICAL AIR-CONDITIONERS 238113 - 4

2. 2 minute on- delay if power is interrupted. 3. 120 second bypass for low pressure control 4. Soft and manual lockouts for high and low pressure control.

2.11 ELECTRIC HEAT

The heat pump shall have a factory installed electric resistance heater available that is designed specifically for application in the WAS Series unit heater shall include automatic limit safety con-trols.

2.12 FILTER

A. 2” Fiberglass- Pleated 2.13 UNIT CONTROL OPTIONS

A. Low ambient control

B. Alarm relay 2.14 OPERATING CONTROLS (Field Installed)

A. Electronic programmable, auto changeover 2.15 WARRANTY

A. The Bard product specified shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years for compressor, and for a period of 5 years for all parts. Warranty period shall start from date of installation as stated on warranty card; or from date of shipment if no warranty card is returned to Bard Manufacturing. Equipment must be used under normal conditions and war-ranty is subject to Bard Manufacturing’s standard limited warranty statement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be done in strict adherence to Manufacturer’s Instructions.

B. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances and tolerances.

C. Install wall sleeves in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof.

D. Install and anchor wall sleeves to withstand, without damage to equipment and structure, seismic forces required by building code.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

SELF CONTAINED VERTICAL AIR-CONDITIONERS 238113 - 5

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 2. After installing Self Contained air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been

energized, test for compliance with requirements. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Self Contained air conditioners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 238113

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2.

C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM with ground wire.

D. VFC Cable:

1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable. 2. Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus

85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.

3. Comply with UL requirements for cables in Classes I and II, Division 2 hazardous location applications.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

of slack.

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

END OF SECTION 260519

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 6. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 7. ILSCO. 8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 9. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

in diameter.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules;

thick.

1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch

2.4 CONNECTORS

thick.

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install barecopper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

below grade.

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for taps to equipment grounding terminals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from

grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

C. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than No. 8 AWG. 2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

deep, with cover.

E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 260526

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

in diameter.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

.

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts.

thick.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 260529

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface raceways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

I. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

E. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.

F. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.

G. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

H. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3

I. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

J. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

C. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep

I. Gangable boxes are allowed.

.

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the

following:

a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

trade size.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew, fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F

3.2 INSTALLATION

.

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches

F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

of changes in direction.

G. Support conduit within 12 inches

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

of enclosures to which attached.

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

intervals.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7

J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch

N. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than

trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches

O. Surface Raceways:

of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding

radius control at bend points.

48 inches

P. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.

and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

Q. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

R. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

.

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight:

temperature change.

155 deg F temperature change.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 8

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

d. Attics:

temperature change.

135 deg F

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least

temperature change.

0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

of temperature change for PVC conduits.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

S. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

of flexible conduit forequipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

T. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

U. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box.

V. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

W. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

X. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

Y. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

Z. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

AA. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

in nominal diameter.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 9

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-up at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of

on each side of the coupling.

60 inches

6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 260533

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

260544 - 1

SECTION 260544 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

260544 - 2

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter .

50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

.

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Presealed Systems.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

260544 - 3

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa)

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

, 28-day compressive strength.

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

260544 - 4

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for

annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1-inch

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

END OF SECTION 260544

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches

F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag,

long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

0.010 inch

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches

2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

wide; compounded for outdoor use.

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3

C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches

2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

wide.

C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil

2.6 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch3. Nominal size,

grommets in corners for mounting. 7 by 10 inches

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

.

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch

2. galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

1/4-inch3. Nominal size,

grommets in corners for mounting. 10 by 14 inches

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

.

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES

2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

."

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

thick for larger sizes.

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be

.

3/8 inch

2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 5

B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch

C. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be

.

1 inch

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

.

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot

F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at

maximum intervals in congested areas.

6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches

G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

overall.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 6

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power. 2. Power. 3. UPS.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

D. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

H. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 7

J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. high.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

END OF SECTION 260553

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PANELBOARDS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2

B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, and listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL.

I. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

B. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 1.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

t response.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

f. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5

C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 262813 "Fuses."

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC)

H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

I. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

END OF SECTION 262416

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

WIRING DEVICES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Weather-resistant receptacles. 3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2

4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) 2)

Single Pole: Cooper; AH1221.

3) Hubbell; HBL1221. 4) Leviton; 1221-2. 5) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1. 6) 7)

Two Pole: Cooper; AH1222.

8) Hubbell; HBL1222. 9) Leviton; 1222-2. 10) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2. 11) 12)

Three Way: Cooper; AH1223.

13) Hubbell; HBL1223. 14) Leviton; 1223-2. 15) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3. 16) 17)

Four Way: Cooper; AH1224.

18) Hubbell; HBL1224. 19) Leviton; 1224-2. 20) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field painting. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. TVSS Devices: Blue.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 6

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 262726

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Enclosures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3

F. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

F. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2

E. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

t response.

F. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 6. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. 7. Alarm Switch: One NC contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 5

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 6

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

END OF SECTION 262816

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1

SECTION 265100 – INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual switches for LED’s.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. LED: Light Omitting Diode.

D. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. L.E.D. Driver. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 2

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

7. For LED lighting fixtures, submit US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, and IES L70 rated life.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: If requested by engineer, provide samples for each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. In addition to light fixture housing and lens, each sample shall include the following:

1. Lamps and ballasts, installed. 2. Cords and plugs. 3. Pendant support system.

D. Installation instructions.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all fixture types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 3

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

2.0 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. LED Fixtures: LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

E. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inchb. UV stabilized.

minimum unless otherwise indicated.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 4

2.3 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or

entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay. 6. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.4 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 5

f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is

restored after an outage. 8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.6 LED LIGHT FIXTURES

A. General: 1. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-compliant. 2. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load. b. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚ C. (-4˚ F.). c. Input Voltage: 120 - 277V (±10%) at 60 Hz. d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection. e. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95. f. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%. g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.

3. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements. b. CRI 80 and color temperature 4000̊ K unless otherwise specified in light fixture

schedule. c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70. d. Light output lumens as indicated in light fixture schedule.

B. LED LUMINAIRES

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 6

1. LED drivers, modules, and reflector shall be accessible, serviceable, and replaceable

from below the ceiling. 2. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.

2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two,

steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

1/2-inch

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel,

steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

12 gage

E. Rod Hangers:

.

3/16-inch

3.0 PART 3 - EXECUTION

minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires

for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

, brace to limit swinging.

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

4. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 7

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting fixtures and perform tests and inspections.

B. Retain "Perform the following tests and inspections" Paragraph below to require Contractor to perform tests and inspections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing light fixtures, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning light fixtures and controls.

D. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify

transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

E. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101.

F. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

END OF SECTION 265100

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 1

SECTION 265600 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Exterior LED luminaires with LED drivers 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. LER Tests Incandescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.

2. LER Tests HID Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 2

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 3

N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

O. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USES ONLY" and include specific LED wattage/lumen configuration. b. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc (16 to 32 lx) and off at 4.5 to 10 fc (48 to 108 lx)

1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with ANSI C136.10.

with 15-second minimum time delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from causing false turnoff.

2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.

2.4 LED LIGHT FIXTURES

A. General: 1. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substance (RoHS)- compliant. 2. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load. b. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚ C. (-4˚ F.). c. Input Voltage: 120 - 277V (±10%) at 60 Hz. d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection. e. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 4

f. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%. g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.

3. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements. b. CRI 80 and color temperature 4000̊ K unless otherwise specified in light fixture

schedule. c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70. d. Light output lumens as indicated in light fixture schedule.

B. LED LUMINAIRES

1. LED drivers, modules, and reflector shall be accessible, serviceable, and replaceable from below the ceiling.

2. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

B. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.

3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting fixtures and perform tests and inspections.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 5

B. Retain "Perform the following tests and inspections" Paragraph below to require Contractor to perform tests and inspections.

Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing light fixtures, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning light fixtures and controls.

C. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

END OF SECTION 265600

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 - 1

SECTION 280513 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fire alarm wire and cable. 2. Identification products.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 - 2

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches

2.3 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE

.

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Comtran Corporation. 2. Draka Cableteq USA. 3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 4. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp. 5. West Penn Wire.

B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system manufacturer.

1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 - 3

D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors,

Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Brady Worldwide, Inc. 2. HellermannTyton North America. 3. Kroy LLC. 4. Panduit Corp.

B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for installation of supports for cables.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 - 4

3.2 WIRING METHOD

A. Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways.

1. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch

2. Comply with requirements in Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security."

. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

B. Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures:

1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by

manufacturer. 4. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. 5. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure

associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. 6. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. 7. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal

blocks, or plug connectors.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

C. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30

inches and not more than 6 inches

5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 - 5

8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

D. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inchesb. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of

. 12 inches

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of .

24 inches

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

.

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inchesb. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of

. 6 inches

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of .

12 inches

4. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

.

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inchesc. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of

. 6 inches

5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of

.

48 inches6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of

. 5 inches

3.4 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION

.

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system

shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 - 6

C. Wiring Method:

1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour, fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and CI, is not permitted.

3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables may be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

G. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch

3.5 CONNECTIONS

conduit between the fire alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

A. Comply with requirements in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping" Annex A.

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.7 GROUNDING

A. For communications wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 - 7

B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

B. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 280513

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280526 - 1

SECTION 280526 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Grounding conductors. 2. Grounding connectors. 3. Grounding busbars.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Signal Ground: The ground reference point designated by manufacturer of the system that is considered to have zero voltage.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Comply with UL 486A-486B.

C. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation, insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83.

1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19-strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280526 - 2

D. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, and 1/4 inch

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

in diameter.

6. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two-hole copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch

2.2 CONNECTORS

thick.

A. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply with UL 486A-486B.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 3. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 4. Panduit Corp. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

C. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467.

1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped.

D. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type mechanical connector; with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch

E. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

centers for a two-bolt connection to the busbar.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280526 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment."

1. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

2. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.

B. Signal Ground:

1. For each system, establish the signal ground and label that location as such. 2. Bond the signal ground to the alternating-current (ac) power system service by

connecting to one of the following listed locations, using insulated No. 6 AWG, stranded, Type THHN wire:

a. Grounding bar in an electrical power panelboard if located in the same room or space as the signal ground.

C. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:

1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point, and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees.

2. Install without splices. 3. Support at not more than 36-inch

3.3 CONNECTIONS

intervals.

A. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars.

B. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector. 2. Pretwist the conductor. 3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280526 - 4

C. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the signal ground. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 when grounding screened, balanced, twisted-pair cables.

D. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a supplement to bonding requirements in this Section.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 280526

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528 - 1

SECTION 280528 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings. 4. Surface pathways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For pathway racks, enclosures, cabinets, and equipment racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with TIA-569-B.

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528 - 2

C. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

E. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

F. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

G. Joint Compound for GRC or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:

1. Comply with TIA-569-B. 2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet

locations.

B. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

E. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast or sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528 - 3

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep

I. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

.

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4.

B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric-Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528 - 4

D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F

3.2 INSTALLATION

.

A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications wiring conduits for which only two 90-degree bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches

E. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

of changes in direction.

F. Pathways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot

2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

intervals.

3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

G. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528 - 5

H. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

I. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

J. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

K. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to conduit assembly to assure a continuous ground path.

L. Spare Pathways: Install pull wires in empty pathways. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use.

M. Surface Pathways:

1. Install surface pathway for surface electrical outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings.

N. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound.

O. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

P. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

.

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight:

temperature change.

155 deg Fc. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation:

temperature change. 125 deg F

d. Attics:

temperature change.

135 deg F

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least

temperature change.

0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528 - 6

fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

of temperature change for metal conduits.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

Q. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches

R. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings according to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

of flexible conduit for luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

S. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

in nominal diameter.

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.

of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits

penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches

5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electronic Safety and Security Pathways and Cabling."

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280528 - 7

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

END OF SECTION 280528

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1

SECTION 283111 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Notification appliances. 5. Addressable interface device. 6. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for cables and conductors for fire-alarm systems.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements. 5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 6. Include battery-size calculations. 7. Include input/output matrix. 8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested

as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72. 9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. 10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature,

and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 2

11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.

a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.

b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

12. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

C. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample warranty.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 3

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment.

d. Riser diagram. e. Record copy of site-specific software. f. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:

1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

g. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. h. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each

annunciator unit.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data

files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II technician.

C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized testing laboratory).

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 4

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service Agreement.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn/strobe evacuation.

C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.

D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations. 2. Smoke detectors.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 5. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 5

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices.

3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module, or remote annunciator.

4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit. 6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Break in standby battery circuitry. 8. Failure of battery charging. 9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate notification appliances. 2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit. 3. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote

alarm receiving station.

2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2.4 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Bosch Security Systems. 2. Fire-Lite Alarms. 3. GAMEWELL. 4. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company. 5. Mircom Technologies, Ltd. 6. Notifier. 7. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 8. Silent Knight. 9. SimplexGrinnell LP.

B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864.

2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 6

3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.

C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands.

D. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:

1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B. 2. Pathway Survivability: Level 0.

E. Notification-Appliance Circuit:

1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72. 2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be

a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at the pillow.

3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.

F. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory.

G. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

H. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.

I. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

2.5 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements to provide products to match fire alarm control unit manufacturer.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 7

B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38.

1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products to match fire alarm control unit manufacturer.

B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be four-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection units shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F

b. Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at

minute.

135 or 155 deg Fc. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

.

d. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 8

C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products to match fire alarm control unit manufacturer.

B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

C. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464.

D. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch-

1. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.

high letters on the lens.

2. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 3. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 4. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

2.8 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:

1. Include address-setting means on the module. 2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type. 3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 9

C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to owner emergency management system.

1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command. 2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for

field wiring.

D. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices. 2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

2.9 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device. 2. Address of the supervisory signal. 3. Address of the trouble-initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply. 5. Loss of power. 6. Low battery. 7. Abnormal test signal. 8. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 10

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

above the finished floor.

E. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.

of the exit doorway.

3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches

F. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: Comply with NFPA 72.

above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

G. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

H. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches

I. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least

below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

6 inches

J. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 11

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches

1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.

from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.

2. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 12

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

C. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

D. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

F. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

G. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.7 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 13

C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software.

1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.

END OF SECTION 283111

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STEEL PILES 316216 - 1

SECTION 316216 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

STEEL PILES

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes steel H piles.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Contract Sum: Base Contract Sum on number and dimensions of piles indicated from tip to cutoff, plus not less than 12 inches

B. Work of this Section is affected as follows:

of overlength for cutting piles at cutoff elevations.

1. Additional payment for pile lengths in excess of that indicated, and credit for pile lengths less than that indicated, is calculated at unit prices stated in the Contract, based on net addition or deduction to total pile length as determined by Architect and measured to nearest 12 inches

a. Additional payment for splices required to extend pile lengths in excess of that indicated is calculated at unit prices stated in the Contract.

.

2. Additional payment for number of piles in excess of that indicated, and credit for number of piles less than that indicated, is calculated at unit prices stated in the Contract.

3. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for furnishing, driving, cutting off, capping, and disposing of cutoffs.

4. Test piles that become part of permanent foundation system are considered as an integral part of the Work.

5. No payment is made for rejected piles, including piles driven out of tolerance, defective piles, or piles damaged during handling or driving.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site TBD.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STEEL PILES 316216 - 2

B. Shop Drawings: For steel H piles. Show fabrication and installation details for piles, including details of driving points, splices, and pile caps.

1. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.

2. Include arrangement of static pile reaction frame, test and anchor piles, equipment, and instrumentation. Submit structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Pile-Driving Equipment Data: Include type, make, and rated energy range; weight of striking part of hammer; weight of drive cap; and, type, size, and properties of hammer cushion.

D. Static Pile Test Reports: Submit within three days of completing each test.

E. Pile-Driving Records: Submit within three days of driving each pile.

F. Certified Piles Survey: Submit within seven days of pile driving completion.

G. Field quality-control reports.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

1. Installer's responsibility includes engaging a qualified professional engineer to prepare pile-driving records.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver piles to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. Handle and store piles at Project site to prevent buckling or physical damage.

1. Painted Piles: Protect finish and touch up paint damage before driving piles.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STEEL PILES 316216 - 3

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Protect structures, underground utilities, and other construction from damage caused by pile driving.

B. Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is included elsewhere in the Project Manual for information only.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL H PILES

A. High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50

B. High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Nickel, Copper, Phosphorous Steel H Piles: ASTM A 690/A 690M.

.

C. High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Structural Steel: ASTM A 588/A 588M.

2.2 PILE ACCESSORIES

A. Driving Points: Manufacturer's standard one-piece driving point, fabricated from steel castings.

B. Splice Unit: Manufacturer's standard splice unit, fabricated from two connected steel plates, of same material as steel H pile or material of equal strength, shaped to encase web and part of each flange.

2.3 PAINT

A. Paint: SSPC-Paint 16; self-priming, two-component, coal-tar epoxy polyamide, manufacturer's standard color.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and assemble piles in shop to greatest extent possible.

B. Pile-Length Markings: Mark each pile with horizontal lines at 12-inch intervals; label the distance from pile tip at 60-inch

C. Fabricate full-length piles to eliminate splicing during driving, with ends square.

intervals. Maintain markings on piles until driven.

D. Fabricate full-length piles by splicing lengths of steel H pile together. Accurately mill meeting ends of piles and bevel for welding. Maintain axial alignment of pile lengths. Maintain structural properties of pile across splice.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STEEL PILES 316216 - 4

1. Splice Units: Notch web of pile, fit splice unit into position, and weld according to manufacturer's written instructions and AWS D1.1/D1.1M for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2. Continuously Welded Splices: Splice piles by continuously welding according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

3. Splice piles during fabrication or field installation.

E. Fit and weld driving points to tip of pile according to manufacturer's written instructions and AWS D1.1/D1.1M for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.5 SHOP PAINTING

A. General: Shop paint steel pile surfaces, except for surfaces to be encased in concrete, as follows:

1. Extend painting to a depth of 60 inches

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and loose mill scale, spatter, slag, and flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning."

below finished grade to top of exposed pile.

C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply coat of paint according to manufacturer's written instructions to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 8 mils

1. Apply second coat to provide a dry film thickness of not less than

.

8 mils, resulting in a two-coat paint system thickness of not less than 16 mils

2. Apply second and third coats with each coat having a dry film thickness of not less than .

8 mils, resulting in a three-coat paint system thickness of not less than 24 mils

3. Mark pile lengths after shop painting. .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Conditions: Do not start pile-driving operations until earthwork fills have been completed or excavations have reached an elevation of 6 to 12 inches

3.2 DRIVING EQUIPMENT

above bottom of footing or pile cap.

A. Pile Hammer: Air-, steam-, hydraulic-, or diesel-powered type capable of consistently delivering adequate peak-force duration and magnitude to develop the ultimate capacity required for type and size of pile driven and character of subsurface material anticipated.

B. Hammer Cushions and Driving Caps: Between hammer and top of pile, provide hammer cushion and steel driving cap as recommended by hammer manufacturer and as required to drive pile without damage.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STEEL PILES 316216 - 5

C. Leads: Use fixed, semifixed, or hanging-type pile-driver leads that hold the full length of pile firmly in position and in axial alignment with hammer.

3.3 DRIVING PILES

A. General: Continuously drive piles to elevations or penetration resistance indicated. Establish and maintain axial alignment of leads and piles before and during driving.

B. Predrilling: Provide pre-excavated holes where indicated, to depths indicated. Drill holes with a diameter less than the largest cross-section dimension of pile.

1. Firmly seat pile in predrilled hole by driving with reduced energy before starting final driving.

C. Heaved Piles: Redrive heaved piles to tip elevation at least as deep as original tip elevation with a driving resistance at least as great as original driving resistance.

D. Driving Tolerances: Drive piles without exceeding the following tolerances, measured at pile heads:

1. Location: 4 inches from location indicated after initial driving, and 6 inches

2. Plumb: Maintain

after pile driving is completed.

1 inch in 48 inches from vertical, or a maximum of 4 inches

3. Batter Angle: Maximum

, measured when pile is aboveground in leads.

1 inch in 48 inches

E. Withdraw damaged or defective piles and piles that exceed driving tolerances, and install new piles within driving tolerances.

from required angle, measured when pile is aboveground in leads.

1. Fill holes left by withdrawn piles using cohesionless soil material such as gravel, broken stone, and gravel-sand mixtures. Place and compact in lifts not exceeding 72 inches

2. Fill holes left by withdrawn piles as directed by Architect. .

F. Abandon and cut off rejected piles as directed by Architect. Leave rejected piles in place, and install new piles in locations as directed by Architect.

G. Cut off tops of driven piles square with pile axis and at elevations indicated.

H. Pile-Driving Records: Maintain accurate driving records for each pile. Include the following data:

1. Project name and number. 2. Name of Contractor. 3. Pile location in pile group and designation of pile group. 4. Sequence of driving in pile group. 5. Pile dimensions. 6. Ground elevation. 7. Elevation of tips after driving. 8. Final tip and cutoff elevations of piles after driving pile group.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STEEL PILES 316216 - 6

9. Records of redriving. 10. Elevation of splices. 11. Type, make, model, and rated energy of hammer. 12. Weight and stroke of hammer. 13. Type of pile-driving cap used. 14. Cushion material and thickness. 15. Actual stroke and blow rate of hammer. 16. Pile-driving start and finish times, and total driving time. 17. Time, pile-tip elevation, and reason for interruptions. 18. Number of blows for every 12 inches of penetration, and number of blows per 1 inch for

the last 6 inches19. Pile deviations from location and plumb.

of driving.

20. Preboring, jetting, or special procedures used. 21. Unusual occurrences during pile driving.

I. Certified Piles Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a piles survey showing final location of piles in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks.

1. Notify Architect when deviations from locations exceed allowable tolerances.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Pile foundations.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Dynamic Pile Testing: High-strain dynamic monitoring shall be performed and reported according to ASTM D 4945 during initial driving and during restriking on five single piles.

2. Weld Testing: In addition to visual inspection, welds shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's option. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

c. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94, minimum quality level "2-2T." d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

D. Steel H piles will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

National Grid VIPAA Project # 15-8557 Edic Control Station May 20, 2015

STEEL PILES 316216 - 7

3.5 TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Clean field welds, splices, and abraded painted areas and field-apply paint according to SSPC-PA 1. Use same paint and apply same number of coats as specified for shop painting.

1. Apply touchup paint before driving piles to surfaces that are immersed or inaccessible after driving.

3.6 DISPOSAL

A. Remove withdrawn piles and cutoff sections of piles from site, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 316216